Home

2011 Chrysler 200 Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. REEDE INTRODUCTION 44399358 9 659 54 n ER DR EI eae DR EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 2 2200 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS W introduction EA AR N AE HD 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 B How To Use This Manual 4 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Ed INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best
2. maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being C Y performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross EE se shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed 055707139 Tire Rotation eee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pr
3. 0 00 ce eee eens 350 Replacement PARIS espies v oo een ond Fees 349 O e eaa oe ae a er ee er ee ee eee 349 Flooded Engine Starting os cus ihrem me se t 285 Floor Console isi 604840866 EERS 4 obs 179 Ehud CapactBes ses aenga p edes RR RD AE ed 434 fluid Leaks 2 ERAS EEUE MESO RES bow eee Ripe 88 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 417 418 Die osse SERE ELE ERROR ER AE se oe 413 436 468 INDEX NEE ed Cool elek 49295 RAS eens types tees 408 Eise rm 395 Power ENE si Ga een ERU PS aoa RES 299 436 JUD RR EE eee Ge a ee Se 435 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 435 Foe Light OON MEME 432 Foe Ligits sense wees soe gree wages 153 196 432 Folding Rear Seal x5 aa me onse 249904465 146 147 Freeine A Stick Vece uses ecce iu EDE ees 382 PUCl EE EE OE a EE EE 342 FOCUS RATE ETE BO ee oe EET 350 PGCINVES MTM 344 JCA REELE a a es E oo ee P 342 eie AA ROL OER EE EO ER ER 343 Filler Cap Gas CAP a nas mda mede 3e ai 188 350 Filler Door Gas Cap quu a de RES deo ben 188 GANO Giese ei E S pe SER RR ADR ERE SR S Eb E 342 eo RE ET EE rr 188 ipu EE ET ET EE ET OE EIS 189 Materials Added 2 4 4 0 40 ou phos 6546562003 344 MenO sara Gan hole hee EE KERR RAS 343 Octone KO exea 33x pes Sas a ee rendi 342 435 Reguit menie sa SEER DR awn cas 342 434 Tink Capac cariere dss 3op9 d PORA rent aes 434 Fuel System Caution assa de rai aeu 351 Fuel Flexible oet EES amp x35 EERDER DE wi 346 ido 64 ba Rags AGE R
4. Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a l
5. During normal operation after turning on the ignition I switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase
6. If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 031508789 Mist Control Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In
7. Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collisi
8. tank is being filled Continued 352 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification La
9. Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User 4 Press the TIME button to change the display from Manual located on the DVD for further details elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped RW FF Auxiliary Mode Refer to Video Entertainment System VES TM in the No function Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further SET Button Auxiliary Mode Belus No function Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Dis DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news ent
10. for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse The instrument panel power outlet located below the climate control knobs has power available only when the ignition is ON This power outlet will also operate a 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE conventional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heating battery power available at all times Items plugged into element do not hold the lighter in the heating position this power outlet may discharge the battery and or rum prevent the engine from starting Instrument Panel Power Outlet Rd a There is a power outlet located on the inside of the center Center Console console This power outlet is powered directly from the NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 034636797 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 16 Fuse 15
11. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as a
12. Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 CAUTION The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater eer tarung cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt The idl d will aut tically d se as the engine MU EE AE 5 electrical cord could cause electrocution warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a CAUTION standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood e Shift the shift lever into PARK only after the between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte vehicle has come to a complete stop grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of the vehicle Continued 288 STARTING
13. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the ignition key in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition switch to coast down a hill These are unsafe the vehicle CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision this can damage the drivetrain DRIVE Six Speed Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway REVERSE driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick after the vehicle has come to a complete stop mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transmission shifting occurs in the DRIVE range For 292 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id example When operating the vehicle under heavy load ing conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions reducing shifting by selecting the appropriate gear in AutoStick will improve the performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE Four Spee
14. However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if so equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel
15. O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say S
16. PPP 213 Mi Setting The Analog Clock 216 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MA Bl Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack eet O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 225 o Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 227 O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMATA DT 230 D Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA ld 230 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio I EGWIDDEd xod ds E OE dE ART S ee 292 lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If 2s vigsio PTT 236 O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 253 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 256 G Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 256 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If EOQUIDDCC rassis eos bag RR 2
17. Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the c
18. Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping un
19. SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EOUIPPED Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
20. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 462 INDEX EE ed About Your Brakes ABS Anti Lock Brake System Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze Adding Fuel Adding Washer Fluid Additives Fuel Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter Air Conditioner Maintenance Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Controls 264 Alr COMGIUONING FUME 2 uoa e spe inresa 276 402 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 401 402 Air Conditioning System 264 269 401 2 7 Air Conditioning Operating Tips Air Pressure Tires 0000000 cee 922 Dur TEE EE OE M 58 67 itbas Deployment ose rep aes PELA 68 AirDap Light 4 545 s 834449554 oe ae es 65 70 85 189 Airbag Maintenance 522640446 RR ED EE OD 69 ADAS ide Sigs 99x 9033949 V3CRPE ST 61 64 66 67 Airbag Window Side Curtain 62 64 67 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 196 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 233 258 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 201 Anti Lock Warning Light uui o sae RES ra 301 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Antifreeze Engine Coolant sissies eee een 409 434 Di pose Pm A11 Appeare EE ou we 9999 EXP q
21. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
22. Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside condi tions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level e Recirculated air is not allowed in Floor Mix or Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is depressed while in any of these mo
23. Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department immedi ately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN ed vehicle system and or components is written in e Owner s Manuals straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LL
24. and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 ESC Operating Modes All ESC equipped vehicles can choose the following ESC operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situa tions ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial ESC Mode This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the heater air conditioning controls When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction ESC Off Switch 310 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation WARNI
25. convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 fi
26. e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery
27. n oe MES Ee He O e 2 bike ERG STAT RARR DEE 85 B SUPP ementa Ga EE UE 5g H Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make aa s iate tns Outside Ihe Venice duas orte RESTER 87 O Airbag System Components 60 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up 020210511 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON RUN 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START NOTE e If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder If this THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop erable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be remo
28. number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 021836669 Manual Lock Knob CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 021836670 Power Door Lock Switch Auto Door Lock If Equipped When enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Auto Unlock On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Auto Unlock On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follow
29. o clock positions 045035585 The right hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM or Tape to CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch op eration in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left ha
30. the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance While operating in AUTO the system will not auto matically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield The defrost mode must be manually se lected to clear the windshield and side glass NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL How Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Control Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower
31. you will then be given a choice to change it NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Manu Recent i Towing gency English Uconnect Francais Last Gas Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Entries Listed one I Enter Name Enter Name BLA ne Enter Name 1st Confirmation Enter Location Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Entry is modified Note Available
32. 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using 045607537 the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
33. AND OPERATING NN ed CAUTION Continued WARNING e Shift the shift lever into or out of REVERSE only e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the engine is at idle speed idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake Do not shift the shift lever from REVERSE PARK pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle SSS 1s above idle speed and hit someone or something Only shift into Before shifting the shift lever into any gear make gear when the engine is idling normally and when sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Continued NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children un attended insi
34. After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id SAFETY TIPS WARNING Continued Transporting Passengers e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO using a seat belt properly AREA SN Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in
35. Blades 404 B Adding Washer Fluid 0 405 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M mde do de AR AR OR STE FORT 405 HE GOM El wars dba cong itti OP sea ds 408 Fl Brake System sae cence 413 O Automatic Transmission 415 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION sir keen wi ches HR ER d P ES 418 O Cleaning Center Console Cupholders 424 Me PP TRE 424 3 Totally Integrated Power Module 424 Mi Vehicle Storage Se es ss 429 W Replacement Bulbs 430 B Bulb Replacement 4 430 TCO as ER NET eo ee ere oS 431 O Front Turn Signal 2er xoa e honcho da 431 OFront Fog Lamp 24 Aa SEE ewes eee we 432 HR iek LANE iaar dat hae oe Bh eee 432 El License Plate Lamp lt 5 4 exse EE RED a 434 W Fluid Capacities lessen 434 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 435 BEE UIE P eg ace ERROR ER oe 435 abro C 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 6 070310711 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Power Distribution Center Fuses 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 En
36. Driving Through Water 296 EH Flowing Rising Water sa 3209842455 296 O Shallow Standing Water 297 Mi Power Steering esse Se es ss 298 O Power Steering Fluid Check esee 299 Marne Brake PD 300 W Anti Lock Brake System ABS 301 Bl Electronic Brake Control System 304 D Anti Lock Brake System ABS 304 O Traction Control System TCS 304 O Brake Assist System BAS 305 o Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 306 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 308 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 310 B Tire Safety Information 311 El lite MOLDE soas 2b eibi e SERA E RSS 311 O Tire Identification Number TIN 315 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 316 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 317 W Tires General Information 321 PIMC Lesse kigtedo bu o9 RR E rires 321 O Tire Inflation Pressures ausa sue eas 322 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 ARadiakP IY Tes os isses Tena Ts 324 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 333 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire ADi lei PCT D 335 And Wheel If Equipped 324 O Premium System If Equipped 097 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped s O General Information sess 341 D Full Size Spare If Equipped eae Mi Fuel Requ
37. Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer Reset button to turn off the message If the problem 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap I the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolv ing the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicl
38. INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MA Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert o
39. Id EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr 1 O Q2 Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side
40. N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 450 M
41. ON RUN position before engine start If 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the bulb does not come on when tuming the key from LOCK to ON RUN have the condition checked WARNING promptly A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap ea ide operating conditions This can cause a fire if you poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause This light indicates that the transmission fluid damage to the engine control system It also could F temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and light turns on safely pull over and stop the power loss will soon occur Immediate service is vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and required run the engine at idle or faster un
42. Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 24 000 miles 39 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odom
43. Phone on the next phone connection NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone also allows the user to download entries one at a time from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept a single phonebook entry from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion
44. RE HERDER 291 292 Overheating Engine soes pen Kees nepta ees 368 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 457 ide WO 2 ba hea tendons RT ae eee ee ae 418 Panic Alarm 4646444444444 dE Ren RA RER COLS ES 25 Paikine BEE 4 ducet eae Senedd eae RC REG 300 Dassie 18 DE iss sed SERE sae HER DEd EA doe s 159 Porson olie dace sacs e dori V indc age DERE 219 n rr TTPPTTE 83 Phone Cellular eene 97 Phone Hands Free uconnect 97 Placard Tire and Loading Information eda Power Deck Lid Release 204506246 tyre RE ERR SS 38 Door Locks siek 5463655560555 6084 EE 31 MINO Q 95 474 INDEX EE ed Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 173 c 245 Gi eer eae epee as Ge ed 195 PICCUN 64 4 pce d Es See ER ND sr A RES 298 299 PUNNOO i EES une phe bebe un d o e 170 unn 44 0 oes ses EE RA DAN VER RR 34 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 57 Freparabom for Jacking ce iN EE enced es 45 3 371 Pretensioners eat bel soseer eek DRR EK D EDE ese NEGE 51 Programmable Electronic Features 213 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless POU ou ah yeas ESRA DEAL Hu eke ee SE NS 29 Radial Piy Dres oe eder qop etek EVE E RE 324 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 410 Radio Operation doc ene 4h PRA RR hook RN 264 Radio Remote Coutols ea BERE sexed ess 262 Rear Eupliolder 44 5444 4044562 D EUER PSP 177 Rear seat Folding ss 242044964 opus iiri 146 147 Rea
45. Start Mode System windows door locks or other controls Press and release the REMOTE START button could cause serious injury or death 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar then shut down 10 seconds later NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e Fuel lamp turns on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and re
46. This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines KR5518002015B 267T 5180015B RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendes the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 The manufac
47. To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button and the CAL indicator will quit flashing 5 Drive the vehicle slowly under 5 mph 8 km h completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings 040506040 5 3 N 6 i 7V8 A9 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the shift lever in PARK 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settin
48. VEHICLE M CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replen ishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid Level Check 3 6L Engine The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Transmission Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme N MA
49. Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined B1c6bf80 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Device Towing n Select Audio SMS Incoming Devices Message Announcement Confirmation will Select a language English Espanol Prompts a pa temporaril on off porarny override pin coda Phones on Select phone l he or Francais Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing 3 is ystem System Lists Phane Deleted contin Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 oice Commands Primar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Voice Commands Voice Commands Primar Primar language return to main menu select phone send N set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing assistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n pager pair a phone voice training ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book YES previous record again o redial NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operatio
50. WHEEL WARMING PARKINWU HEATED DPEN LOWES i CUITLET OAT Rao BANE BHAKE EA um T s d ea LID fi HAUL BATTERY HEATED Mo PANOSHELD LT PAREL SEAT BELT aue Doel lr M us a VALE eme 1 TEW FAUL cingi DET MOST iLi Ld kd TEER oe dog vd da T AR a O0 SZ n oC ds LOW GLOW PG POWER verdrag p Wins OF Amd ABA SLiDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTEI MO ETER FOR UCCONNWEET HAZARD FOUS WHEEL ATEUENO FLU AWO WASHER RELEASE HANDLE Fi AAEM ATEN purTON sre Low C B E SRS X A um m k r AIC AIRBAG pve Ii 2 PUSH OFF BALTES TION THis GORE DOM AMT SI FLEMENTARF PABRSENDER Done LAS GOAVERTSLE CONVERTIELE HIE OVERS Am EL amp CTTID INDICATOR LHGHT DIL TEMP TEMPESATURS RESTRAINTSYETEM AlRAAG OFF TOP DOH TOP UF M MR FACE CUONTHTIOWER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears engraved on the front right door sill under door sill moulding and on the vehicle registration or title Ze Vehicle Identification Nu
51. and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately 2 seconds Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the odometer will display the following messages doos ip EE ESRA DA or Ed Door Ajar onn P eo SE ER ee ED RR OO an De Trunk Ajar LOW DiE o2 Ee ga DR Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required pASCAD S ooie et ne ESSI P E eee es Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL Transmission Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then warnings such as Low Tire Door Ajar and Trunk Ajar will display in the EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for specific messages LoW TirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a transmission over temperature condition When this condition occurs the HOTOIL message will be displayed in the odom eter along with a chime NOTE When this message is displayed bring the vehicle to a stop and idle the engine in park until the message clears Raising the idle of
52. and Operating for information Towing Requirements Tires on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carry e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ing capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and spare tre GAWR limits e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or ating for proper tire inflation procedures vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres personal injury sures before trailer usage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 WARNING e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of ma 2 000 Ibs 907 kg To
53. and then turn off NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Mix and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibil ity of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of servic
54. blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System e Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Traini
55. compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter Floor Mat Safety Information fering with the pedals or the ability to con
56. control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up 6 long grades on a hot day the engine oil temperature may become too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph 85 km h until the engine oil temperature is reduced 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id NOTE The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of WARNING Continued 53 mph 85 km h You may of course reduce your e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is vehicle speed further if needed on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle J ACKING AND TIRE CHANGING take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jac
57. delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the ve button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory se
58. disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac Hon e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxde in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode
59. disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 CAUTION If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF away and jam the player mechanism convertible or soft top models if equipped RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button ra a second CD if one is already loaded Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning other side is a CD should not be used and they of the current selection or return to the beginning of the can cause damage to the player previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK EJECT Button Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the EJECT button to eject the CD CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playin
60. display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately 2 seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Indicator Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain on approximately 15 seconds as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 18 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQ lights or headlights are turned on 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 5
61. e During the 16 second arming period if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm e Once armed the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel the trunk release button on the instrument panel and the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however You can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming seguences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is arm
62. fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession disc
63. incorrectly the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire WARNING 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the e To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this provides maximum stability warning may result in personal injury To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench
64. injury Preparations For J ump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield To allow jump starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover Locking Tab 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN ed WARNING
65. knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 wil
66. label sewn into the out collision severe enough to cause the airbag to board side of the front seats inflate Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 022632669 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side LU 022632670 named Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Location NOTE e Airbag covers
67. leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main Do not use water alone or alcohol based OE IE taining Your Vehicle for further information coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they CAUTION may not be compatible with the engine coolant e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant coolant antifreeze is not recommended antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Adding Coolant specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Your vehicle has been buil
68. maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by F
69. may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both WARNING Continued front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the side airbags during impacts that require airbag If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags occupant protection do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC Knee Impact Bolsters The area where the SABIC is located should re The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the main free from any obstructions driver and the front passenger and position front occu Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front between you and the side airbags the performance Airbags could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you caus
70. not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with EVIC For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors Th
71. o Electronic Stability Natural If Equipped N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 CAUTION VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than e When installing the Totally Integrated Power 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is battery properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Totally Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will indicates a problem in the circuit that must be possibility of compressor damage when the system is corrected started again 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be
72. oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press and release the DOWN button to advance the display through the Trip Functions 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate in the EVIC display This ECO message will appear when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average readin
73. on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near J and turn 646 6 C n the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between ad Sy COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 4 In very cold weather C D if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures ees aay va mes 284 D Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock DB Automatic Transmission 284 Systems eee eee eee eene ANormal Statins uos osa m Soke es S aes 284 5 Key Ignition Park Interlock 3 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or D Brake Transmission Interlock System 289 at TREE OT N OT EE AT OE TAT 285 D Four Speed Six Speed Automatic Olf Engine Paus TO Start ss resestir iaci 285 Transmission ee see re ee ee eee eee 290 El dier State se oot ee S aep pa ee EE 287 Gear Ranges senes 290 Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 287 Mo AE DEd ERG AE a N Automatic Transmission 287 AOperaHon 1 2 eee EE eene 294 O General Information 294 280 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 295 O Acceleration io oi ooo ERLA ee ee ea S 295 A Dee to resres eraran eee AUR ee 296 W
74. operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure tha
75. operation 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning with two attachment points When the jack is partially them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the expanded the tension between the two attachment ground CAUTION points holds the jack handle in place Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle 819b068d Removing Jack Handle From Jack WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 060533068 060533069 6 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN ed WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted
76. or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the CHECK TPM SYSTEM mes sage is then followed with a graphic display with pres sure values still shown This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the Tire Pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of
77. or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 368 B8 If Your Engine Overheats 368 O Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only Me QUID PCG si na HE AE 4 quod aot Bee 369 N Jacking And Tire Changing 370 Hack Location s desde c99 k vbi REDE 970 ES paie ire StOWage aucem ed OR REK PRE 370 O Preparations For Jacking 371 O Jacking Instructions 3 aai x aco i VRIES 372 W Jump Starting ouaaa aaaea O Preparations For Jump Start B Jump Starting Procedure N Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Shift Lever Override W Towing A Disabled Vehicle D Without The Ignition Key 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is
78. send aah Gee eens 190 Passe xcd i4 Ed pue 3 22 233 229 sea we 153 Seat Bell Reminder iis an eho 4d ED A ee 189 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 196 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 198 333 Irachon COMO 44444555 5 5 8407s toners 310 Tor Idk oe eee ee eee eee 87 152 196 431 432 ol ES EE ee er ee eee 189 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 188 Loading Vehicle 4 56 4 chy ERA HER ays 352 354 Capaeilies users saefobS EORR Es PS EXC PRES E 354 jT 517 472 INDEX NEE Id Locks Auto Unlock sis carae ex oe Child ProtechOn 2 0 4 20 SKA RR EIS 3 04 N Power Door 0c eee eee eee Low Tire Pressure System zu us EER REK DE Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren EARN H sous wense ES DERS IAD scans LEub cotol DOdY isxaadesd ke domi RESEP EE Lumbar UPPER oarsudeseu eer Ee ie n Maintenance Free Battery axe cs coda tw Maintenance Procedures Maintenance Schedule Maintenance General s Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 199 392 Manual Service sons EERS B4RGORG x EES Map Reading Lights oc ae ER EE ERES Master Cylinder Brakes 5 44544 RT Meienol Mr Mine Hei Computer x 2 35x22 AR RES 201 209 MIOS 2 2 ik ab TOTO TRITTITUTITTT 93 Compass Teinperaune is occa d drin deo es 93 Electric Powered leen 95 OBIE soos ra BOEKE RR SUA ESSE S NX 96 Rearview ace qoa qoed X 3 xo S
79. serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone amp e button and Voice Command vn button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available
80. strument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 031733066 Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever down ward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the column in position pull the lever upward until fully right side of the steering wheel engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 1 ON OFF 2 RES When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over 4 CANCEL 3 SET accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph i 40 km h NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic S
81. the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
82. the Voice Command Svea button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Ma
83. the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km O C O O O L L LL M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake lining
84. the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE e The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position e With either front door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitter will not function Locking the Doors with the Key There is only one external door lock cylinder which is located in the driver s door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward To unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication see Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle of this manual SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle
85. the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RB Z RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE
86. to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos Setup
87. turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window defroster only when the engine is operating window NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 186 Mi Instrument Cluster is se ee 187 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 188 ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If EOuiDDed c2 a 9 9e Pee oe fed E OE aes 201 BConol BURONS cu2dceeteee teres dace 202 HO Compass Temperature Display 203 N Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC EEduibped ss soe RE R oe geese eee HEER 206 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC BE OE Pr PDT o Oil Change Required If Equipped E Trip PUDCHOBS auus oes WASK Sa bordo 209 Et ompass Display oes eie ume ea hoe se 211 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features
88. when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 seconds appears Headlights With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press the SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Displ
89. without WARNING stopping Limited use spares are for emergency use only In Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Emergencies for further information handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep WARNING inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is depen
90. 13 436 Master Cy IGI ise die duse des a de ELE HOE DS 413 SEE EE aeq SEI E ES 300 Mare Lie 462469460 mers rod eon d d dera 190 Bloke is Dm 300 Brake Transasde Interlock sb cor Rs 289 Dir rm 413 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 83 Bolle Replacement sees SR EE DER bp sieri 430 BUIDS ANCL eene Sk eds perpen oe BE 87 430 Calibration Compass sequ kie DERE GR Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 464 INDEX EEN Capacities Bld iis ok ESRA 4 ones E S 434 Caps Filler SES fore he ce ewe ENTM gU 350 CIL TBROHIS a2 s co se needs ot cose a as 389 397 Power SICCHING s gr does PEN bea SHE ee wis 299 Radiator Coolant Pressure 410 Sca ro s25 4646s Sao Pane ea eee eg ee a4 419 Carbon Monoxide Warning 84 346 Cellular Phone lt 4 04 s Geeeeadeeovseu wes 97 264 Chains Tire sas ea oe ee oe eee bep AAS a 330 Glans mei Flat de 3 od ets ee ees padi Turi 370 Clary TUB NE sa GR yee ened a eee ees es 313 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator EDI 42364 oho g base Genesee HA ea esas 992 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 84 CHECKS aleb RP 84 Child Restraint 2 245 205 664408468 72 73 78 81 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 76 78 Child Safety LOCKS ss pe d ded ag ink od 0905005 33 S AE PED Cm 177 Clew Aif Gasolie a eue och irc ERROR ddr SOR DE 342 Cleaning deels sos ea RADE EER eee ae eee NE 421 Windshield Wiper Blades 404 Climate C
91. 258 Schedule Maintenance leen 438 beat Belt Maintenance 26 4025 REESE SORS 423 Seat Belt Reminder 55 56 Dede DENS eene AREAS SEE EE BE eee 85 Adjustable Shoulder Belt is YE RS REK RE E 48 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant WOMEN 2444 sure se eed ea be oi 07 Child Restraint 2225 xum Ps des ur EUR ER 72 81 E dende Goa parka de boas Sus ER dea EA es 57 Front Seat 2 26bM Hee oo 30 x4 43 33944 3 x 43 44 Dis DEU erresa s XR REPE eS Wd eqs 85 Operating Instructions sue aueh BR RR RS M J ieleilsiOnEIS sui coc wrote es EO KOS EE De 51 Real c PTT 43 KE os sme 2 oe ee oa P UN oe ed 189 Untwisting Procedure saos sex ex EE AERE 47 Seat Belts Sedan een 39 Dede oye sete tes EIE Seek ewe Gh eee eS 134 AUSENTE tan sake nee RAK 199 arn A EA 8454 5 4s eee DRA ER eee a 147 ead oues 6 Hoe E EE oe EE oe eee 137 Lambar SUD POLE 44 8 6456S LEE PE ERST REN 141 lc MP 135 476 INDEX NEE ed Reid od IE soe GAS eee RE REEDE ER 146 147 Ira ri uin rU N PRED RS 140 Security Alarm Theft Alarm ie tss HER 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 409 435 Selection of Oil ei asd d Hee ors eee ee OO 396 Sentry Key Immobilizer seg os epo Rd a 15 Sentry Key Programming ss s RR PAS WER was 17 Service Assistance SS Se 453 Service Contract uus qwe eek baw IE os weg vus 455 Service Manuals een 457 petuo Die G
92. 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING
93. 345 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition ra malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a
94. 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Maintenance Schedule 0 438 H Required Maintenance Intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE
95. 57 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls If POUIPPCU esee d REUS RE IR AR OU 262 EL RACIO Operation iss 53 474 9 974 909 Ibi GE 262 BED Ile A I 263 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ll Climate Controls O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning o Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped D Operating Tips 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Side Window Demister Outlet 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Ignition Switch 5 Analog Clock 6 Radio 7 Passenger Airbag 8 Glove Compartment 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 10 Hazard Switch 040136677 11 Storage Compartment 12 Climate Control 13 Trunk Release Button 14 Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040335767 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading below the red area of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air condi
96. 99 505 SEER es 177 3 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 172 O Front Seat Cupholders a 2s d ice dh 177 O Pinch Protect Feite 940445445544 e555 172 x LE E D Venting Sunroof Express sss 172 O Glove Box Storage Compartment 178 D Sunshade Operation 172 Mi Console Features ss ss Sk Se se 179 E Vind DUENDE crae tonnes sacs oe ER as 173 Da EO oe pes Eee en seta ss 19 o a T N N enc was 173 B Rear Window Features 181 o Rear Window Defroster 2 0 42 dps S e eres 181 O Ignition Off Operation a 22444 0604 oda 179 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light 030407085 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when CAUTION the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the
97. A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MAM WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your autho rized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar light
98. AINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 114 Months Maintenance to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Service Schedule warranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter WARNING L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas ERROR ETTET 453 O Prepare For The Appointment 453 df te dies PESE 44444 ERAS apne ade gaa 453 o Be Reasonable With Requests 453 N If You Need Assistance 453 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 454 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 454 Hn Medico Contactes ss x Ee AD RAS VR 454 D Customer Assistance F
99. AS HERE 350 gno ME EE ELE OT EE OT OR A24 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 164 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 390 352 391 Gasoline Clean Air SS eae 342 Gasoline Reformulated 342 Gauges Coolant Temperature ss de med ok gd 188 Publ sas eee EE 593939 PRSE SE TEER PE 188 Snc 192 TaChOMmeter P 192 N INDEX 469 Sk MEET EE OT EE ET OE TOEN 290 Gear Select Lever Overrid uie ach PRE REK 383 Gear Dl FD 290 General Information 18 129 341 General Maintenance aue a ena coda cba dii 394 Glass ledig san ER vas eee dee KERE AR 3 S 423 Gross Axle Weight Rating 353 356 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 959 905 SUIS 2426455 Gre des peau PURIS CU APUD E 353 Hands Free Phone uconnect 97 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Wale socre duane DEERE EER ON 296 Hazard Warming Flasher a cos n ea ies nde RE Rd 368 Head Restraints sine vd 4 PHOTO KAS kee et 141 es ie de PP 431 Pulp Keplsceitieiit susse x penarine ao ee OR 431 lede P 421 Ls Degli 4 444 onde OUER HA oases 153 201 High Beam Low Beam Select 5witch 153 Cn UR DERS pagans Sa ER IR HE edd ee 159 BE in SET ope RE VR ERE EE EE RUE 153 Rela see dee ES 19v ARE et EES 431 DII awe OR AR EE een ee ees EE EG 151 Healed oi ETE ee PER KAS OROS AL RD EE NA 137 Heater Beane Sasha Ghee ASA HER RES d Re t 264 Heater Papine blok d
100. C ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by ot eee en ee step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative perfor
101. CC HESYSL ET 2311 200 OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC N m C z O
102. CLE 153 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Light Control 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking bra
103. D for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or c
104. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes 045607544 The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor R Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost 7 Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets
105. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time displ
106. DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will di
107. Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result J ump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehi
108. EM Sa 154 O Instrument Panel Dimmer su est iw ata as 154 o Map Reading Interior Lights 155 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 156 O Intermittent Wiper System 157 EL Windshield Washers iuc edes e eo 158 BLISETOdIUE a o gis SERE RISK rae S 159 o Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only 159 W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 160 N Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 161 ELTO ste Ate 463 EE EA 15 9 3 4 162 El To Set A Desired Speed ass ogee ed ie 162 EO EIS est ET ER EE REA RS 162 Hd To Restle Seed og Vals ORR eo poe AE 163 B To Vary The Speed Setting 163 o To Accelerate For Passing 163 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 164 E Programming Hotel MK uu acc tk Rd 165 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 168 Ese LIOHIBLIDK sels ek BY Di 168 o Reprogramming A Single HomeLink DELE 234244404 CD 169 COWL sea ES ee ee ae 169 E Troubleshooting Tips xs 9 EERS ER Re 169 O General Information 170 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME W Power Sunroof If Equipped 170 Mi Electrical Power Outlets 179 O Opening Sunroof Express 171 W Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver 3 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 171 IP Eouipped segi aia ot eh es beh HER OR 177 5 Closing Sunroof Express 171 Mt lelie os iux 4 9223
109. H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 314 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE
110. ING NN WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom capacity other than what was originally equipped mended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires satisfy this require ment and can be identified by the M S designatio
111. INTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will Washing have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or eguiva The following maintenance recommendations will enable lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion completely with clear water resistance built into your vehicle ai y e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu What Causes Corrosion lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR The most common causes are Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never t e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation ie E aaa i s scratch the paint 7 S SIDES graven Pec e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint N finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities me Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is e Do no
112. IOCK usus 9 9 enk 216 219 238 247 eties bei Giel sis do REGEER RARR ED ne 219 Shift Lever Override lle 383 Shifting Automatic Transaxle een 287 Shoulder Belts as VERRE ER EES Rg BEDE ES 43 DIGS ADA ons ho ERA DAE HORE eae ee oes DAE 66 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 276 DITS TUTI srera da Per og Se SERRE HER DU 87 432 Slippery burtaces Driving ON 2445 ER RE XS 295 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 330 Sek osos ded eae EE due dus 331 pat Hie e 4 90x EA S DEE SERE HER 325 326 370 Specifications Od Mv 396 Speed Control Cruise Control 161 195 DPeCUOMCl A IL 188 DIAN cos o weave vp OE wes EE RE E 284 Engine Falls to Siart soes mese SR Sonde kee 285 pap and DGIO D se ressas Pond pad RE EE 284 Starune Procedures amp iac VREES sae daa BARE 284 Steering Eeue 44444 999 4493 SELA 52 429 ER EG 298 299 Tit COltmi ires drerit uera eas DEE ES 160 Wheel TUE 4 5 oak 45553 92 92 BIER GRA ES 160 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 262 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Me aie PIT 262 N INDEX 477 E a ee eee ee 178 429 DIORUEE VODICI xci go 3928 cae RD ARE PRE EORR 275 DUCK PiceWNe 24 aa sd m 382 DUE ROOI si ses ane Noe de eed eee es 170 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 58 ateis Eng me ON occ amen ES Ros Ge AA 398 WACHOMGCIC 2 23225 94 E RS EER HAAS ees 192 TURONE T 432 Telescoping Steering Column 2 RE 160 Te
113. Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHIC
114. LE 401 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recy
115. LUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DV
116. MERGENCIES NN ed Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available wheel lift towing eguip ment may be used Rear towing with the front wheels on the ground is not allowed as transmission damage will occur If rear towing is the only alternative the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 2 4L 389 Bl Engine Compartment 3 6L 390 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 391 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 291 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance LIOBPOS tad qe uwae a wars HER eR ee E dre Pu 392 B Replacement Parts ES ES Se 393 W Dealer Service EE es se 393 Bl Maintenance Procedures 394 HENENG ON si pero an KERR QD en eee eS 395 HEES OU Piel 4 4 448 eee eck EAT RAT 398 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 25 oae ah ca cea sn 399 O Maintenance Free Battery ise hd 299 O Air Conditioner Maintenance D A C Air Filter If Equipped O Body Lubrication oes ig beh de mde ha 403 o Windshield Wiper
117. MS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the Sw button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say 3 SMS Send or Send Messages e Youcan either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the vr button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA 3 E 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Where are you I need more direction LOL Why I love you Call me Call me later Thanks See You in 15 minutes I am on my way I ll be late Are you there yet Where are we meeting 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the Sw button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement
118. MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 16 Digit Character Display Countr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM oe If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Program Type 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SETUP Button e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between subtitles to different subtitle languages that are the following items available on the disc if equipped NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to switch to different audio languages if supported on select an entry and make changes the disc if equipped e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if highlighted selection Use the remote cont
119. NG In partial ESC mode the engine power reduction feature of ESC is disabled Therefore enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is re duced NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light Ihe ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator md Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Li
120. NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry wit
121. O button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System No function If Equipped ed For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the SIES EE N Made Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further A details m Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Refer to
122. P NONE NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked J acking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Jack Warning Label WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires General Information for information about the spare tire its use and
123. P aos OER N 377 Oera pee ER os WER AA 395 434 435 Oil Change Interval za nase oa ER 194 208 396 Oil Piller Cap 3 ovo vci ted d C RE 389 397 SB uli TP 398 Oil Filter Disposal 4 44 es a RLESE DER HR RR 398 Oil Selection 445 43 65 ka DiE AE ew 396 434 OU EEE iis bose E SE R59 PS ees 398 ONCINCCIING s xx KERR E era ERA Ret 368 N INDEX 467 DELE 2447544665 942 1T HIS ERA EE ete 284 Temperate Gauge 452540442444 MEERDE 188 Enemie Oil VISGOSID asas d irs dues ee Pee HR Es 397 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 67 Entry System Illuminated 22299 8 HE 20 Ethanol ROER AS ERA IE SON IR N 343 Event Data Recorder 422222299 30x x xA 71 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 84 346 dd Ede SIE sure EE EE SS 84 405 Extender Seat Belt leen 57 Penor LENS sirip 4545460405 IHRE ra 87 Fabri Care secese AR N endeu pi 422 Filler Location Fuel 0 00 188 350 Filters Air Cleaner 44 ick eee tk 550452459 9093243 399 Aur CONGIMONING s 2 5 44 x Ke RS a oe ee es 276 402 Automatic Transaxle leen 418 iii de MERE oe EE eee d 398 435 Eie ie did EERS ER Gy ees ees 398 Flash To Pass SS SS SS ss eee 153 Eli lies erirken itunei ETEei READ HE ae 368 Hazard Warning ierices abe war od Reds 368 TO ee OR OE agree EER TONG 87 432 Flexible Fuel Vehicles EES Range sies da dean x ea os 349 ENCMIC OU 226 24 sek ER RAS 6400044554 348 Fuel Sequisemehls o 0 fede ees as 346 348 Maintenance
124. Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to Auto Sct mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs tor comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time User selectable outside or recirculated Automatic Automatic User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 81a12736 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instr
125. ROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating and Air Conditioning 045607574 Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Temperature Control Blower Control 045607577 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position 045607540 NOTE Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 266 UNDERSTAN
126. RTING AND OPERATING 295 Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 296 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed Traction When driving on w
127. RTING AND OPERATING NN Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if
128. START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m x2 NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle theft alarm not active 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious e Remote Start Aborted System Fault injury or death when inhaled The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to the ON RUN position away from children Operation of the Remote Start To Enter Remote
129. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id such as law enforcement that have the special eguip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces reguire that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Infants And Small Children WARNING e Safety experts reco
130. The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the righ
131. To switch to system setup you may say on of the 3 following e Change to setup e Switch to system setup e Change to setup e Main menu setup or e Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command EVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision
132. UE ando x ERREUR RR A 93 D nn wage Tr OO EAST EE ES 97 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System quce d veu ge x He 333 MOPAR Accessories SS SE 393 456 MIEE ELBE 4 osse 24 4 e066 Ga 6 ome cease aA 343 New Vehicle Break In Period 83 Occupant Restraints sies sae rie 0864 anus rs 64 68 Occupant Restraints Sedan 39 61 62 64 67 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 2 426245483 342 Odometer 22224 m Se HOES RSS REEDE RS 192 ilu P EE ET EE EE 192 195 N INDEX 473 OU Chaise MULAO 4 sacnee7eusehe eas 194 208 Oil Change Indicator Reset 194 208 Oil EBD Ch598 225299 6 ROER Reo EE ORE 398 Oil Filter Selection eren 398 Oil Piessute Mica uade wor3 ER SE HOS s 190 Oil EHI S snare age shee sag ones ds 395 435 Capa wa cao e gare ee ee ROER ees inre 434 Chance Interval issie wo RR HAY 4 194 208 396 CCCI vies wem qax des EPS TES 995 bo PD EE FEE EE ed 395 Di poal 460 v9 P eee oe earra ye ee 398 Filler 4003 GELEE bees SKREE N se 398 435 Fitter Disposal ers a tease a oo eee a 398 Identification Logo 3 144454454444 9 ex 396 Materials Added tO 22 uo eene tia RS 398 Recommendation sen 396 434 OVMUNCHC as P m 398 NOEOSIU x23 oy ee hae EES AE EDE EPA 397 434 Onboard Diagnostic System leise 391 392 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 164 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 OVEIGHING osse cues BEE
133. WRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs NOTE 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 295 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupan
134. Y TOW a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the four speed automatic transmission fluid level before towing The AutoStick six speed trans mission is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealership service center for assistance Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving Reduce speed e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Recreational towing is not allowed CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drive train will result NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed
135. a cargo area Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or belts out of the area NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
136. ades qepdues EES ese 287 Hitches Trae Pr esa eal Ss oa eee ERK 357 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 164 HOO THOR AE ME AN chen ED TEER oO 148 Hood Release ee 148 IOGDIDON 4 aa peed ont eee OE HER RES E RE vd 12 POV EE IE EET ORDES 12 fe AL eee ene EE ees EE 12 Iguibon Key Removal acies cd ERRAR RAAR DE 12 470 INDEX ENE ed HEHSIGC POY wat oes tee SDA PEE REESE AS 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key auc 44 BR SUE seo ER 15 Infant Restraint cc sup bo on ee He a 72 73 Information Center Vehicle ana aana 206 Inside Rearview Mirror sss 93 Instrument Cluster eren 187 188 Instrument Panel and Controls 186 Instrument Panel Cover Ln 422 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 423 Integrated Power Module Fuses 424 Interior Appearance Care ase soe espe SY Res 422 Menor EMS wm 155 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 157 IBDEEOGICHODE xcu 302359 84319299372 eae MAR EES S 4 Jack Location sss doe Ee ES oye SEE IPEA 370 lick OPE NON PT 3 0 372 Jacking INSHUICHONS doas t x raderen ER DY 372 Jomp Ite prener EEE EREE E BREED EE 377 Kor ERNE 24 444 EER pran rpe 14 kes Propran eea 83 Rb Ea 17 Key kepla etiei sus adage EER DEI DAS Ge 16 Key Sentry immobilizer aes 2 bee ee oe os 15 Keyless Entry System os we aes sad Sucka HEG HR 21 Keyless Entry System Sedan 21 kes PELIS 12 Kee bol ef 224 ahahe
137. adio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as 14 buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 13 e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the center of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located 12 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set The Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the RESET button on the steering wheel for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is dis played To change the zone press and release the STEP NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 Dur
138. all is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the va button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the follo
139. anagem eee eh eee ee 58 Lane Change and Turn Signals 196 432 Lane Changes EE EE HER N OF 153 Lap ohoulder Dells 4 1x25 3 9 24 484 BREI DES yii 43 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Ede 2444 RE de SE FE Eesti SEEN Se 78 lud 87 Hood Pr 148 Lead Free Gasoline 441 445 4555 Di ER Re DR 342 eas MILII 6345 45 46 ou eh oo ERAS eRe hes 88 MeO Mires ER OR EE eee es een apes 328 Boud si 43449745455 4044 os ae ons es 87 430 IB C RARR ER BE LS a aes eee 87 150 ADI qaos Gna e SUPERO ees SA Eq 65 70 85 189 ie EE EE ds doa WP EE ed 432 Brake Assist Warning 005 310 Blane VIS Sources iue see gee bee On a KA 190 Bulb Replacement ord be ead oe ope AA 430 431 Daytime RUNGING 22642 e6 h46e8e0 404954 154 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 310 Engine Temperature Warning 44 tasse ss a 190 EX CHOE D oe ee ED EET EDE 87 FOS ia DRA Se di EN seus os 153 196 432 Headlo E Will cesa ti guunet ce eae oss 151 Mead Mr lol Headlights On With Wipers a x secre des RE Ree 159 High Beam Mdicator sae 9 0 829 Een eee e 201 Hltnunaled Enty 2299 x9 IER ORR R EE 20 ls lemme Elsie uvas e RET RS 404 151 MENO lt 2 ag R ee eae eae ae hae eee es 155 N INDEX 471 LIGBNS fanaa ote DE BOE AR BAAR EDE 434 Iaehts On Reminder sone ER SEE cease es 154 LOW Publ ooie fae cae d ORE ED qd 189 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 199 Map Reading serrie BEN EDGE tages 155 Oil DIOSSUBS s eu peque
140. and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following h h j il filter e Change the engine oil filter pages for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system
141. ansmission Please see your authorized dealer for additional infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 CAUTION Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause severe engine damage under extreme condi tions Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause Consider the following items when computing the loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load weight on the rear axle of the vehicle trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions 057003767 e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight put in or on your vehicle stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch e The weight of the driver and all passengers 360 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the Towing Requirements trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive factory installed options or authorized dealer installed train components the following guidelines are recom options must be considered as part of the to
142. ate Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 miles 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter JJ Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary Replace
143. ated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale wil
144. ay N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is
145. ay ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the EVIC this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK AN 041236676 To set the analog clock located at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button in until the setting is correct The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX J ACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate dd AE AE AA Pas add Ce i QU L2 5 DISC WPS WHA 042005200 Media Center 230 REO UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VO
146. ay to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trai
147. ays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your local authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information es ry 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 9 Oil Pr
148. bel Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver s door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 354 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best w
149. bile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Ph
150. book 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect
151. button does not illuminate To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030437628 Mirror Directions When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the OA 030436998 E control to the center position to prevent accidentally Power Mirror Switch moving a mirror To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Adjusting Sideview Mirrors Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror when judging th
152. button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped The RKE remotely lowers both driver and passenger front windows simultaneously Lowering the front win dows using the RKE is a two step operation 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once 2 Press the UNLOCK button a second time and hold the button until the windows lower completely or the win dows drop to the desired level then release the button Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the Illuminated Entry system if equipped will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency RF noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed NOTE Perc
153. c gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed
154. card pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the lire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NNS TAK TING AND OPERATING 337 NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
155. ck down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING When the window is almost closed there is no anti pinch protection To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Reset Auto Up Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead the Auto Up function will be disabled To reactivate the Auto Up feature pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button To enable the window controls press the window control button again THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 021936672 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id open or partially open p
156. cle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick posiition below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved from the AutoStick position into the DRIVE position General Information e You can start out from a stop in any gear except sixth The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transmission control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio e Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions To select second gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever to the right once ee STA
157. cle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Tum your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheat
158. cling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is Operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 A C Air Filter Replacement 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 7 Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the r
159. colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine EQUIPPED running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into E 85 General Information the vehicle The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued NN STARTING AND OPERATING 347 the other sections of this manual for information on CAUTIONN Y O CAUTION features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNNG JM Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing mate
160. cond time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 031433076 Interior Dome Lamp 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA There is a second light located midway back in the headliner To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The wipers and washers are operated by a switch NA on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031508787 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for low speed wiper operation or to the HI position for high speed wiper operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wip
161. cy seks RS eben RM 99 Jtt ICUS aces des 1 8 m OES ETOS 152 196 432 uconnect Hands Free Phone 97 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 186 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 459 Universal Wransmtter isss ipea ta oa eee ees 164 Unleaded Gasoline ive ava SERE EERS ED SE 342 Untwisbng Procedure Seat Belt saak su 47 Upholstery Care rnm 422 Vanity MINO 24 dw ea 2436984662159 94 ER Variance COMPASS ue imeda RR RE BEE N 203 212 Vehicle Certification Label 352 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle LOadiING semi ELE REIS d 318 352 354 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 velle io S owas wars 9 vex dy X4 RE RS 275 429 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 ViscOstty PCG ON erresa tese SELA ES ea 397 Voice Recognition System VR 129 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster BE las oo PP rm 188 Warnings and Cautions ee Ee Ese Ee Ee 6 Warranty Information 2a cee stses SEM spe 456 Washer Adding PWG 43 s ss qa hd tug kiris 405 Washers Windshield 156 158 405 Washing Ven 44542428 449 74 CX EROS 419 Water Divine TitOueh soia selec se ES I RD Wheel and Wheel Trim 480 INDEX NEE Id Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 421 Wind DUMCHN 44440444 RA pore RES 45 o s 37 173 Widow FORCING iis ord ARE LARR EERS DES 276 heo AN OE EE N bee N 34 POWOE x4 2045 4 Gos EER eee BAR AS ER REA 34 Windshield De
162. d interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes For the first three minutes the horn will sound intermittently and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch one door must be open or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter doors can be open or closed and close all doors NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm NOTE
163. d Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
164. d Transmission This range should be used for most city and highway driving it provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up DRIVE 3 Four Speed Transmission This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear The trans mission will operate normally in first and second gear Shifts into third gear may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds The 3 range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up LOW Four Speed Transmission This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 CAUTION If the transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits the vehicle comput
165. d in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury e Never use the PARK
166. de a vehicle Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock Systems These systems prevent the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK They also prevent shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and the brake pedal is applied Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK 290 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Four S peed Six S peed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are s
167. ded cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow
168. dent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 330 STARTING AND OPE RAT
169. des the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be dis abled automatically is these modes are selected 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple
170. ding the Feature of Your Vehicle for further information Center Console 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mMm Dual Storage Bins The lower bin can be accessed directly without first The center console contains both an upper and lower exposing the upper bin by operating the right latch with storage bin Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged the armrest down t id to th t iai eee eee eee eee The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder room for CD s DVD s and a power outlet that allows a cellular phone to recharge while concealed NOTE e A notch in the side of the console base under the armrest will also allow use of cellular phone while still plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest latched down e The power outlet located inside the console can also M EE NSZSXXQE eee energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker s Storage Console Detail Package 1 Release Top Compartment 2 Release Bottom Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically
171. display F or C e Trip computer functions e Audio mode displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing e Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 The system allows the driver to select information by Press and release the COMPASS button to pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel O display the compass heading and the out switch bank located below the climate controls side temperature Press and release the MENU button to advance COMPASS MENU the display to Trip Functions or Personal set Button tings or to return to the default System status Press and release the SELECT Button to accept MENU display gt a selection The SELECT Button also resets Button various Trip Functions Press and release the DOWN button to advance SELECT V the display through the various Trip Functions Button AE Electronic Vehicle Information Center E VIC DOWN Displays Button When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Remote Keyless Entry Bat
172. do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEE General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EOUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following reading lights two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user
173. e ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be guickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle win dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevent
174. e DP E 418 DEM chy te 39 12 eee es E EO ee PR EORR RARE OE 177 Alet Ge OWING ape deu alias cage seed os 112 Auto Down Power Windows 9D Auto Unlock Doors leen 32 Auto Up Power Windows 36 Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 22 s RR ees 93 Automatic Door Locks sensn 31 32 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 194 208 N INDEX 463 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 269 Automatic Transaxle 12 284 287 415 Adding TING s es aso 2 HD EK A17 418 436 PCE 418 Hind and Filter Changes a ou usd ace erede 418 Fluid Level Check sss 417 418 Interlock Syste 4 65 05 IE EL DREK IR ME 289 Reset Mode SS SS SS SS ees 295 Selection Of Lubricant vx xa Reet3 eas 436 OMMING cessere s KORES eae A Bd Berto DU 287 Automatic Transmission Idi A rm 415 Special AGGINVES Loss remane BOE BR 7g cs 416 Autostick x sew i eb ex RW dd qb ETE RR 294 B Pillar Location s 0 aan cha 66 44 SA ORE DE N 317 hono seprene HE e EE DY N 399 Jon Slate 24 94544462 aer ea ee 30 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 DOCO tana 90 29 eR se bbe aes ease PEE 999 Belts Sell lt 229 pees need oo AE ESAE RS MES 85 Body Mechanism Lubrication 403 Brake Assist System eun Reo dex eden eee es 305 Brake Oy ste cases a e bh 2 yen MOE axe a dob 413 Anti Lock ABS s ecruce y d OE ET EE 301 Fid Check ou oat dus OR AE ENE 4
175. e Weight 359 EE SE SR TT ET oe O Towing Requirements acies Gaede oo da oat 4 360 oO Loose Filler Cap Message ie tee bus ce v 352 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 HION DDS 45 oe E ey awe ce tee EE ue es 364 o Towing This Vehicle Behind lll Recreational Towing Another Vehicle 1 5 2 222 RE EER Ri 365 Behind Motorhome Etc ss ss ss es 365 284 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position and you must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start Four Speed Transmission turn the ignition switch to the START pos
176. e end of the multifunction lever to the third for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for detent AUTO will activate the automatic headlight headlight operation system 031407548 031407553 Headlight Switch Headlight Switch 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and turn off based on the surrounding light levels Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function lever must be rotated to the off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHI
177. e has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II syst
178. e size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Illuminated Vanity Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MEM mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with
179. e that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than or more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given d
180. e tum signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK
181. e with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head dem 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head p
182. ease occ oc voc nc ER cn 38 W Remote Start System If Equipped si la Trunk Safety Warning 99 O How To Use Remote Start E D Trunk Internal Emergency Release 39 Mi Door Locks ee EE EE EE EE Er id W Occupant Restraints EE EE ee 39 o Manual Door Locks 2226222952999 ex 30 3 Lap Shoulder Belts onono anana 43 O Power Door Locks sesse se se se ee 31 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 47 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOORS s2 ESE ane hey REK TRIES ea ee rs 33 B Power Windows nns 34 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 48 El ear beat Des 4 nea 65a d doter eder HER ORE 49 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 49 O Advanced Front Airbag Features 60 O Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR O Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 64 l eil sra iese sre SE IE bees ENE 49 4 Event Data Recorder EDR d Energy Management Feature 2 422i 50 BE O Seat Belt Pretensioners iii eerie ix aed o1 EE OE N 83 EL N DE IE ia N Engine Break In Recommendations 83 H Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert sess ses 55 Ee EE AE EE EE bre da 84 oO BeltAlert Programming 56 i ML LEE oa Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 57 EEX de a eee ae 8 ELE ET 84 El eat belt Exlender ss dc id doe cee ins oben d e 57
183. ed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered but the warning signals have timed out the park and taillights flash three times instead of the normal twice and the horn will chirp three times when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors this feature is only available if you have RKE or if you open a door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds if the doors are closed They will fade to off immediately when the doors are closed and the ignition switch is moved out of the OFF LOCK position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console lights do not turn off in 30 seconds if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the dimmer control is
184. ed into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location TERE NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed EATING C on the driver s side B Pillar KG OF ak RONT SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an AN 100268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire Placard Location 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GA
185. ederal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming e Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position e Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter but ton until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly
186. either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uc
187. elf calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever into the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING Continued NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving longed periods with engine running Engine may be unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous fora started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the number of reasons
188. ellow 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE aue a Battery Feed 40 Amp Green Papp EE N Cigar Lighter ie Ad Sunroof If Equipped Equipped 20 Amp Instrument Panel Wireless Control 10 Power Locks Module WCM Yellow Interior Lights Clock Steering 15 Am Selectable Power Control Module 11 P Outlet Inside Cen SCM Lt Blue ter Arm Rest Pres po Yellow 19 20 Amp rer Amplifier 20 Amp M Yellow If Equipped 13 Ignition Yellow 15 Amp 20 Radio 10 Amp Lt Blue 14 Red Instrument Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 E e 10 Am Ignition Run Oc Ignition Run Cli 27 10 Amp tion Module 22 10 Amp mate Controls Hot Red OCM Occupant Red Cupholder If Restraint Control Equipped ler ORC 23 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Ignition Run _ Lt Blue ASD Relay 3 258 LU s 25 Amp Sunroof If 28 T e meme Restraint Control gnition Run ler ORC 25 meu Heated Mirrors If 2 quipped 29 Required as ee Auto Shutdown a ea Lt Blue ASD Relay 2 30 20 Amp esc E Yellow Equipped 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ie Er 10 Amp Headlamp Washer Anti Lock Brakes Red If Equipped ABS Module If 30 Amp ye d 40 Am Equipped aan Bank ea If Diagnostic Link ae 10 Amp Equipped 33 Red Connector Control ESC Module If Equipped Powertrain Control Passenger Door Module PCM 36 30 Amp Module PDM Pink Driver Door Mod Anti Lock Brakes le DDM ABS Module If TX e SLE 34
189. elping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxi
190. em is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle B
191. enever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in you
192. ent The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Engine Air Cleaner Filter WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are high quality and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind the left front fender and is accessible without removing the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to _
193. enter position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instructions refer to In stalling The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles 022636667 Rear Seat LATCH Anchors Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restrain
194. er or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EVR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect
195. er that can be used with the power outlets Refer to Power Outlets in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz 5 L bottles or cans The one peice insert can be easily removed for cleaning An optional removable ashtray may be located in one of the cupholders Rear Seat Bottle Holder There are built in bottle holders located in both rear door trim panels Rear Bottle Holder 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury STORAGE Glove Box Storage Compartment The glove box storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel To open the glove box pull outward on the latch handle located on the front of the glove box Glove Box Storage Compartment 035233070 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 CONSOLE FEATURES The center console is located between the front driver and passenger seats The center console armrest slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort The center console can be used for storage and is also eguipped with an electrical power outlet Refer to Power Outlets in Understan
196. er control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031508788 Changing Wiper Speeds Intermittent Wiper System NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause are operating The wipers will resume operation when between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles 031508788 Changing Intermittent Settings NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected
197. er may override the manually selected gear position by changing shift points This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear third gear for six speed The transmission remains in second gear third gear for six speed despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to operate The Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the shift lever into PARK 1 2 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Restart the engine 5 Shift the shift lever into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required 294 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN id AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehi
198. ertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www Siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode
199. ervice 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 64 000 miles 104 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 56 000 miles 91 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading D
200. es not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles
201. esides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when
202. essure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illumi nates you must increase the tire pressure to the recom mended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion 334 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light wi
203. essure Warning Light quA This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is tumed from the OFF to the ON RUN position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the guantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Maintaining Your Vehicle 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi we ton If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level
204. et or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doin
205. etaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C Air Filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mi
206. eter Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 SU aU Okie a Id 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance S
207. ets of four Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one n
208. evel of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA WARNING CAUTION e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes heating element and or degrade the material of the spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex seat haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushi
209. five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 4444 6 54408 ada ea ED OOR ERA Ed AO ERA hi FUEL REOUIREMENTS
210. for CHildren LATCH less than one year old The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit Here are some tips on getting the most out of your with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion while the child restraints child s back is against the seatback then the child should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt e Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is WARNING against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re The restra
211. formance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title an
212. froster 86 266 267 273 Windshield Washers 156 158 PMG oes fore ee ee OE RE ROS RE 405 Windshield Wiper Blades 404 Windshield Wipers oon aa ke RR RE NE 156 Wiper Blade Replacement 23a su Aids d aa 404 Wipers Inferm ttent 2 24664094640 rer pHi 157 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special preca
213. fter the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assis tance coverage details on the DVD in t
214. g before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 e Display Units In To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently displayed Press and hold the SELECT button once to clear the function currently displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed fu
215. g so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 298 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping di
216. g steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each time when unbuckling 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force
217. g time display to a small CD playing time display 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for fi
218. ged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 286 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 sec onds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
219. ght also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds md when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop 3swai Y when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver 054903773 that caused the ESC activation U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load ed dards Code TIN R The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure eoe Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades OFF 312 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95
220. gine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 074438460 5 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Oil Fill 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel
221. gs displays in the EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 3 Press and release the DOWN button until Compass Variance and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to increment the Variance Value by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the MENU button to exit Press the DOWN button if you wish to calibrate the compass manually Refer to Manual Compass Calibration Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the DOWN button to display the following programmable features Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English Spanish French German Italian or Dutch de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Auto Unlock on Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position all doors will unlock whe
222. h a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Cleaning Center Console Cupholders Removal Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift upward Cleaning Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liguid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to the graphic below for FUSES TIPM location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 FT Center High 3 10 Amp Mounted Stop Red Light CHMSL Brake Switch 5 20 Amp Trailer Tow If Yellow Equipped 9 N Power Mirror arias Switch Climate Air Integrated Power Module Controls ca u areen UOD Sense 1 pom IOD Sense 2 40 xS Power Top Module Green If Equipped 2 20 Amp AWD Module Y
223. has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 A RO q5 XE Dom AW a gA BA nl ELECT MM ry EXTERIOR DULA HIGH BEAM TURM SIGNALS HEATED SEAT TIOR LOCK A MM HROGEAM DARANE Line ASEET SYBTEM D 3 a4 020 tj Te X i EYETFM FUEL HERR i Dey MANTEN LIGTING LOW BEAM EY ACTIVATE LAPP LHD WER ms ming ow LIFT imr oc ya HILL DESSERT Ve PARA INTERMITTENT WIFER WITCH POWER OUTLET NS OUTLET COMTI BRAKE PEE ES a teat ty u j CV me N GT Dad amp ow M EC oy PLUS PAL SIDE REAR YVEMDON MEMEL WAS DOME LHAT PRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEANE LOWER AIH REC CULATION ELEC TAOAH ALL PHHEP PAR OF ANTHLOER WEATHER FLLE LEVEL MLET Ni BrAUum IY coq mwE Mar ETSIEM 0 0 7 wn G amp 00 c Bi wor snae MIHDEHIELD s ELECTPONIG ERAKE SYST ENGINE NL HEAT MANTEO ELEETRICALAY PARK LTS WEAR HET LAMR MEAS AE GUAT AND VENTILATING FAN RHODA LOER THROTTLE FOUR
224. have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC they are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced pro tection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be eguipped with the following airbag system components e Occ
225. he instrument cluster and features a driver interactive dis play displays information on outside temperature com pass direction and trip information NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Control Buttons 040834255 Compass Mini Trip Control Buttons STEP Button Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus i e Temperature Trip Func tions Odometer Trip A Trip B NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 RESET Button To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel The following displays can be reset or changed e Compass Temperature e Trip A e Trip B Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the STEP button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation R
226. he Anti Lock Brake System The light will to slow down or stop come on when the ignition switch is turned to The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys the ON position and may stay on for as long as ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase four seconds braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the Anti Lock Brake ABS a
227. he Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assis tance references e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the vr button and say 37 4 6 tt Send Saying a numb
228. he disc NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to tum on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in
229. he fascia will occur Continued NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 CAUTION Continued e When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not the LOCK or ACC positions The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 mi 24 km it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed truck towing dolly or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised CAUTION Towing faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 mi 24 km with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 386 WHAT TO DO IN E
230. her position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Rear Seat Belts The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen gers on sedans The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel in the panel Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hea
231. hicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked wh
232. hicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW Continued 362 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id WARNING Continued e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 3 GAWR Information in Starting and Operating for informa 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch tion on tread wear indicators and for proper inspection utilized This requirement may limit the ability to procedure always achieve 10 of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting
233. hift lever into the NEUTRAL position ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the cupholder liner 6 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Remove the cupholder liner 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN ed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow If transmission is operable e Trans in NEUTRAL e 25 mph 40 km h max speed Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow e 15 mi 24 km max distance prot OOK Flatbed ABR SO BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN equipment designed for the purpose following equip position not the ACC position ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to t
234. hlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal F Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 021432709 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE
235. houlder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Positioning the Lap Belt 022636664 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract ful
236. ic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 provide the most direct path between the anchor and the restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you behind the child restraint route the seat belt through push the child restraint rearward and downward into the the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This seat removing slack in the straps according to the child should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an restraint manufacturer s instructions inquisiti
237. ice contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion cer
238. if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022636666 Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The Advanced Front Airbags
239. ill move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or backward Push the seatback switch forward or rear ward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Heated Seats If Equipped There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located on the center of the instrument panel above the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the l
240. in Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In 3 this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel jo ie toe ELE eay d grato DE dH e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l M Radio t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station enu Radio to switch to the radio menu s 44 I1 h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Menu Radio t itch to the radi j PRA leke to ien e To switch
241. in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat f 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607757 E 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha 022607497 nism 1 Downward Movement 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock 2 Rearward Movement into the back decorative plastic half NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 022607494 NE AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see a
242. in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk lower both front windows if equipped or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE e The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects e Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter 020210511 Vehicle Key To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The Illuminated Entry system if equipped will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicl
243. in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately three seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does n
244. included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased per
245. ing and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system to Partial OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Elec tronic Brake Control in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383 WARNING 3 Turn the ignition to the ON RUN position without starting the engine Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could 5 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the hole at the explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi front of the cupholder and push and hold the override cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for lever forward Miis EA RA AE og 6 Move the s
246. ing program ming the Zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the RESET button for approximately 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the RESET button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster E 14 F FM 101 1 10 041036947 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass heading display N 5 E W NE NW SE SW e Outside temperature
247. ing serious injury Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved Continued protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes wi
248. ings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit
249. int must be appropriate for your child s straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy weight and height Check the label on the restraint for ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or weight and height limits fatal injury to the infant e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it All passenger seating positions contain automatic locking retractors However any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child 2 restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is
250. irements 2204 342 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 326 EN NN oe RE N ON Fi lie DIIS a out du RS LERE EED EE 027 n Gasoline Oxygenate Blends D Tread Wear Indicators 328 D E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 343 ALICO TIG oa dee dee 203 ade rx oe ced 328 OMMT In Gasoline 2 2 2222 344 O Replacement Tires 42 eoo orev eds 929 d Materials Ad fad io Eel coo oceans ene 244 E ire Chains ausos Zu e Be pees PERS ES 330 5 Fuel System Cautions isses 345 W Snow Tires eese x Hok ke be ebb eed s aot 4 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 246 B Tire Rotation Recommendations 331 282 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed N Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only W Vehicle Loading se 352 If Equipped ese eee ee ee ee eee eens icd O Vehicle Certification Label 352 O E 85 General Information ss ss 346 2 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 353 O Ethanol Fuel B 88 a iaces ach dona wane 347 o Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 353 OE EE ET n EOVETIOREIHIO eat sos adeo d Rath EL DRS AR DS 354 a UAR RAM a Oe AA BStating isses lese 349 N railler Towing oae s ph HOEDE SHOES 354 Cruising Range cee cence eee 349 O Common Towing Definitions 355 ET E 349 O Trailer Hitch Classification 357 O Maintenance 000 eee eee 350 EE N Trailer Lu la Adding Fuel ss SE EE ek se 350 O Trailer And Tongu
251. ist of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook 3 e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VR button during the playing of the desired name and
252. ist the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Autho
253. ition as indicated by the stamped icons 021836674 Child Lock Control Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up UNLOCKED position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on the driver s door has up down switches that give you fingertip control of all four power win OWS 021936671 AUTO Power Window Switch There is a single window control on the front and rear passenger s door trim panel which operates the front and rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and when the accessory delay feature is active THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Window Down If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto Down feature These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatical
254. ition and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 For vehicles equipped with Tip Start Six Speed Trans mission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage auto matically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Un burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and dam age the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dischar
255. ivity 116 O Things You Should Know About Your connec ONE ead uu quen gees IER 117 O General Information 129 ll Voice Command If Equipped 129 H Voice Command System Operation 129 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MEM ELCOBIDARUS erreper RSTERQERPERREEERLI 130 oO Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest 147 D VOCS BES uod aree espe SENS PP SIS PS 134 M To Open And Close The Hood 148 hc Arm 134 W Lights sare ences secon ees fe hese os 150 D Power Seats If Equipped 199 O Multifunction Lever Sid ss ER nae HI 150 D Heated Seats If Equipped 197 o Headlights And Parking Lights 151 O Manual Front Seat Adjustment 139 H Automatic Headlights If Equipped 151 B Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If O Headlight Time Delay x 25 eua rn 152 DRE EE tisdicns sao Si EI Tan ETES vss ote baa SEERDE DOR REY RIES 152 ELReECHNING Seals seu aso Rabe prer dene 140 alane Change AE RE ui ese quus rei de 153 D Lumbar Support If Equipped o High Low Beam Switch 153 Head Restrainis uoo aas eter a esas d RU 141 O Flash To Pass LLL eee 153 H Fold Flat Passenger Seatback 145 A If Equipped E 153 A Folding Rear Seal xu arsit dote eae eS 146 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 154 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 ALENS On Reminder 25 REED LAER R
256. jecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EVR button while a call is in prog
257. ke is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Map Reading Interior Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be aimed at a specific spot if desired The lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 will remain on until the switch is pressed a se
258. ked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The J ack Location vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack in the trunk Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 Spare Tire Removal Preparations For J acking Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 6 060533067 3 Set the parking brake Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 4 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission 5 Turn OFF the ignition 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel EH us ri ki Tt Uo uam TERT i LH 4 i l i Magi yf a suat re Emu OW me m ee
259. knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to 16 Digit Character exit setting tone balance and fade Program Type Display MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do no
260. l causing a loss of vehicle control Lights If required mounting posts must be properly Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights installed if not equipped from the factory while you work the controls Check turn signal and high Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or beam indicator lights on the instrument panel mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors H Inside Day Night Mirror D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped O Power Mirrors O Adjusting Sideview Mirrors o Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 93 J3 95 96 96 97 T El PERSON ain depot ne Ge Ma ed EE RUE oe oe 3 100 EV Phone Call Features ux suus R BEREA os 108 O Uconnect Phone Features 4 5 65 5 cx ER ds 110 H Advanced Phone Connect
261. l flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of IC an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the
262. l show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the
263. lant Level Four Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle Six Cylinder Engines the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addi tional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an exa
264. ld non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System
265. le recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multises
266. le systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling fre
267. lease the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then within 15 minutes insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries or death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
268. led to MAX level 7 7 Quarts 7 3 Liters 11 6 Quarts 11 Liters N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part phot ches MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid 5 Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Hace Ol AA Buone Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting Chrysler Material Stan 5 l 5 dard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent spare Plugs 24L Engine except ZPR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 11 mml Spark Plugs 2 4L with PZEV ZFRSAP Gap 0 031 in 0 8 mm Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCBA Gap 0 031 in 0 79 mm Fuel Selection PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part e MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Automatic Transmission ATF 4 product Brake Master Culmder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not y available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Seerne EE MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis 5 sion Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF
269. lent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp t
270. ler towing If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing this section please consult your dealer to for full details on the towing capabilities of the vehicle Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver 356 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sur
271. lied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 306 STA
272. ll still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system Operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire the tire fail dition ailure or condition Base System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted
273. low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON and a LOW TIRE message will be dis played for a minimum of five seconds 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain
274. ly To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is program mable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Auto Window Up If Equipped Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To cancel the Auto Up movement operate the switch either in the up or down direction and release the switch To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE ANTI PINCH PROTECTION e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go ba
275. ly WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push anchorage button to release the anchor age and move it up or down to the position that serves you best 022636665 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a hig
276. mance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure
277. mand At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mo
278. mber N INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 Hlenition Key Removal si aa dn 12 O Key In Ignition Reminder 14 O Locking The Doors With The Key 14 NM Sentry Key EE EE EE umb e Y RES 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information su ss c9 be meg 18 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 o Rearming The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System N Illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped O To Unlock The Doors O To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN O Remote Open Window Feature If O Power Window Switches 34 EPPO sees se ie ene EER 25 3 Auto Window Down If Equipped 35 E Using The Panic Alarm o soa e de exi 25 3 Auto Window Up If Equipped 36 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 A E N E EN N 37 D Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 3 Wind Buffeting 2 00 00 cece ee eee B7 D General Information ls 26 i Trunk LockAwd Rel
279. mination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be in
280. mmend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be seats used in the forward facing direction are for children used either rearward facing or forward facing in the who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher than one year These child seats are also held in the weight limit in the rearward facing direction than vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are Tether
281. mperature Control Automatic ATC 269 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 188 368 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 76 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm ii as sap des 18 fil Steering CODE sasa ed SX HEER dox OR 160 Tme Dely Headlight 3432252 EE EDE 152 Tire and Loading Information Placard 317 Tire Identification Number TIN 315 dei AE ie oi 3 444 EE cep es Gea be ee ee 311 Tite Satety Intormoallo a 4542446455 a REESE eR 311 jn ora 4 ce hears ee wes 4 oe TE 87 321 459 meine Lile ol THES canes et ees honra 328 Pir reste vis ates by dbe ages et Ed 321 orn sac SR tates KOORS He ORE 330 Canon oos oe NEE ERA URE eee ERK DES NI 370 Compact Opale sus a nei RR mde ERA REK A des s 925 General Information esce sR RAAD ER EE 321 Ee POE oe was ER DELE HEARD HA DE 323 Inflation Pressures tani s oa 9 3 09 koe DE ee d 922 es sate aa EE OE EE EK 370 356 0f TES siens ats was EER RD RE He eae RR 328 Load Capacily a 2 920 9 we RE OR Ede 317 318 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 333 Pressure Warning Light 198 Quality GIONIS adde SERES PRETI ee es 459 ISadidl uses 9 EE HEER HEER He ARE DE Replacement 478 INDEX NEE ed ROO SA AL VIA AE TERI SETEL 331 Dale RASSE REDES Koop ASE DE HE 311 321 7 M 219 HOW Tikes P ress 331 PE Vo dae qup aE 370 OPINE Dm 327 Iread Wear Indicators aae qt Ere RS das 328 Tong
282. n have the system inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped Ihe ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation i Fach tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and infl
283. n authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver to fasten their seatbelt This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver seatbelt is fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the driver seatbelt is fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the driver seatbelt is fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If the driver seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The followin
284. n emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or to
285. n is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation E This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command SVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing
286. n on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type 332 STARTING AND OPERATING tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
287. n switch OFF erases the set speed memory NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system
288. n the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Flash Lights with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds
289. nction Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display The compass heading indicates the direction t the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight COMPASS compass heading and the outside tempera Button ture NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed NOTE A good calibration reguires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass
290. nd Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required See your authorized dealer When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the
291. nd switch has no function in this mode CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONT
292. ne CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is asingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
293. nflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 322 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a c
294. ng The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 1 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 2 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If yo
295. nob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Subtitles If Eguipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the
296. not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the c
297. nspection efforts through an autho WARNING rized dealer Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid service interval is not required The fluid should only be 300 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK The parking brake lever is locate
298. nt loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Make sure that e The child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km
299. of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoul der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal WARNING e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Continued 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one anothe
300. of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in s
301. of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is mold
302. omfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
303. on This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Manual Front Seat Adjustment The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor 030933271 Manual Seat Adjusting Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If Reclining Seats Equipped The recliner control is located on the side of the seat To A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then for petite as well as tall drivers A lever with a ratcheting lean back to the desired position and release the lever mechanism located on the outboard side of the seat Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to raises and lowers it Total travel is 2 2 in 56 mm its normal p
304. on the airbags will not be in place to protect you NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller System serviced as well e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including rem
305. on matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire 326 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Since this tire has limited tread life the original eguip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use s
306. onebook in the phonebook NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phone
307. onnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds ru The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control
308. ontact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place Backup Lamps 1 Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner behind the tail lamp 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp housing 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp housing NOTE Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar tool between the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic grommet from inside the trunk can assist in lamp re moval MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 4 Twist and remove socket from lamp 5 Remove bulb from socket and replace 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed License Plate Lamp 2 Pull bulb from socket replace and reinstall the lamp i sine amal see press rd Ine bdie assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal FLUID CAPACITIES 16 9 Gallons 18 5 Gallons 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 Quarts U S Metric 64 Liters 70 Liters 4 4 Liters 5 6 Liters 6 Quarts 2 4L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle fil
309. ontiel oase SES HOE KAR ERROR ares 264 ClOCk ux sue R33 P tu RISQUE NS RS NA 216 219 238 247 Com Holder sos sok RR ERROR DA EE 179 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 263 Compact Spare T ceu s tantos Re OE tinis 925 COMBS 40 255 see ab DERE P md 201 205 211 Compass Calibration sues ea a PEER N EE 205 212 Compass Variae e uocis ua ie Mg denos EE 205 212 Computer Trip Trdvel 222 233 ety ex 20 209 Console ees 147 179 Console Floor a5 a4 aces ess BES BARE EY EE 147 179 Contact DervVICe is ek siet BERE RS OER 455 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 410 COON es EE TA TER OOR 408 N INDEX 465 Adding Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Capacity Coolant Level Disposal of Used Coolant Drain Flush and Refill Inspection m 434 Tm 411 Points to Remember cies 412 Die sie Cap iss RIES ha b deh TERES SE 410 di OES ageer veu vex vedi ves 410 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 409 434 435 Corrosion Protection siese 9c RE 418 Crankcase Ventilation Module 20 ei AE C EE AE eS 195 helder uie d dor iinis RE 147 177 424 Customer Assistance eee eee 453 Customer Programmable Features 219 Data Recorder Event Daytime Running Lights Dealer Service 2444446054 ebb 60554454468 393 Deck Lid Power Release sn 38 Defroster Rear Window ea 181 Defroster Windshield 86 266 267 273 Delay Intermittent Wi
310. options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Cancel Com
311. or The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 455 A eve CONTACT avo messie we se se ee Re 455 Bl Warranty Information 456 E MOPAR Parts o4 ccc0beduuus ed E ea ee 456 Mi Reporting Safety Defects 456 O In The 50 United States And Washington BEET OM Ser ee eee ee ee re O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire E DOChOB Grades 4i bs remp doe RR 459 Quality Grades P 459 oO Treadwear 4 met oe eae Oe DES SES SE Se eR 459 H Temperaire Grades 44 4 ans oa oh ED EE AE 460 NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and l
312. osition Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicl
313. osition within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to your autho rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthor ized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is arme
314. ositions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle From inside the vehicle the trunk lid can be released by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The shift lever must be in PARK for this button to operate To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle press and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the word deck will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out the word deck will display until the trunk is closed On EVIC equipped vehicles the words Trunk Ajar will display NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when
315. ot show the degree of brake application 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 12 Tachometer The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 14 Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press
316. ould increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any mark
317. ounterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the
318. oval or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR
319. owel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition
320. pare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 your original equipment tire replace or repair the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud sand snow or icy conditions do not first opportunity spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously
321. ped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive
322. peed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignitio
323. pened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually
324. people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the bottom switch to move the D seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat The Power Seat Switches The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion w
325. pers 30 157 Diagnostic System Onboard 391 Dimmer Switch Headlight seses sos REDES s 159 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 417 418 OU ET Ee cosest 49 aon Ste d os ewre 4 mas 395 POWE OOO oa eye anus 99 p DER oup DE eg 299 Disabled Vehicle Towing ee ee Ee Ee Ee ee 384 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 411 ru 9 ie aa ERAS DO IR N ER 398 Door Locks Automatic SS SS ss 31l Door Opener Garage 4104444505 eked ene Go ed 164 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 466 INDEX NEE Id Through Flowing Rising or Shallow DANCIN Walei eies saika dod BREED E 85 Fuel Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Emergency Trunk Release Emergency In Case of Jacking Jump Starting Towing Emission Control System Maintenance Engine Air Cleaner Block Heater Break In Recommendalons 2 v3 wg SERS ach s 83 Checking Ol Level ss snr HERO HR fens eens 395 COPAIN ds sie Z3 ER Geese DEER 390 Compartment Identification 390 Coolant Antifreeze 408 435 Son A ees 408 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 84 346 Fails tO Stari ss me eedit Re so ERE HALE 285 MOCded SING o2 cp mu pd ves dum pg ve 285 Fuel REGUIEMENIS vas ies Bore 24a edes 342 434 Jarp DEDI o ee d terio
326. position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased Continued vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate 302 STARTING AND OPERATING computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent WARNING Continued wheel lock up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni press firmly on your brake pedal when you need ies tors t
327. quencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN id MPEG Sampling Fre guency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to t
328. quire more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces NE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coo
329. r Window Defroster lesen 181 Rear Window Features eee 181 Rearview Mirrors iss dads x ORIGUPGA 64 RE EE ec 93 Recorder Event Data leen 71 Recreational Towing Wie a xm aor NEAR cag ER x 369 Reformulated Gasoline Ls 342 POOO MEM 402 Reminder Seat Belt SS SS SS 55 56 Remote Control Door LOCKS 6 24444040446 ESEL EE AR aa 21 Sec AGW thay 9x v EES ond DI ae as 18 Remote Keyless Entry RKE se sesse 21 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan DI Remote Sound System Radio Controls 262 Remote Starting System ie AR He RR RE ED ADS 27 Remote Trunk Release 38 Replacement Bulbs ss issie PER e es RES 430 Replacement Keys soseer oh ok HESSIE HE RE 16 Replacement PariS separeres eE eneh ayes d 393 N INDEX 475 Replacement Wiles 4 bsatonsesaue 4 ESE PR os 329 Reporting Safety Deleel sug ERK one ste 456 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 194 208 Restraint Head eee 141 Restraints Child 2k cake shee ch bem TE E EXA 72 Restraints Infant sisie esce HEDE SE KERR EE De 73 Rotation Tires 3 2455 3 05 ER PES HE RD OO 331 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle so vs eed ws saws 85 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 87 Safety Defects Reporting 466 ies 4554 2b Hes 456 Safety Information Tire 4 311 Balch iis M 84 Dalely Exhaust Gas x42 974 93 949 9E dede 4 84 Satellite Radio Antenna 233
330. r a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly c
331. r in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size SZ y 022636662 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Pulling Out The Latch Plate 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch adjust the seat plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly 022636663 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as s
332. r playback of MP3 WMA files may be f i 160 128 144 fected bw the followme MPEG Audio 2 220516 112 96 80 64 0y 0e 0 owne rum ayer 56 48 e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer 48 64 96 128 to load than non multisession discs land 48 160 192 VBR e Number of files and folders Loading times will ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title increase with more files and folders are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Layer 3 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not single session disc enable the Disc at Once option supported before writing to the disc 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INF
333. r transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Fluid Level Check 2 4L Engine Use the following procedure to check the automatic transmission fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill 418 MAINTAINING YOUR
334. release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 031336999 Hood Safety Catch CJUJUI 031307190 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open FEE position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood Hood Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open ma when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious Hood Prop Rod Hole Location injury or death NOTE Before closing the hood make sure to stow the prop rod in its proper location 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MAE LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407547 Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Headlights And Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turning th
335. ress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the S button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dicta
336. rials lit in or near the vehicle when remov stae46ab ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never E 85 Fuel Ca E use it near an open flame 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles
337. rivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings a Max GTW Max Trailer Tongue Wt Engine Transmission Max Frontal Area Gross Trailer Wt See Note 1 2 AL Auto 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 3 6L Auto 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 900 kg 200 lbs 90 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Note 2 Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields guards are not recommended for use with all four cylinder engines with automatic tr
338. rized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 247 9753 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s serv
339. rm the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 4 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 15 Cruise Indicator If Eguipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON 16 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Single Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer The word Trip displays to show that the odometer is in Trip Mode Press and release the button again to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first set the display to Trip Mode Then push and hold the button approximately 2 seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter Dual Trip Odometer If Equipped Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it a second time to change the display to Trip B Press and release it a third time to change the
340. rol to scroll equipped up and down the menu if equipped NOTE e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between e The available selections for each of the above entries gt playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by varies depending upon the disc PII Es Cees These selections can only be made while playing a e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options om will display the following e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control k
341. rovided instrument panel under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or and cause an accident that includes you This can happen being thrown out far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility
342. s d 2 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure Close all doors and place the key in the ignition Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 5 Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child 041032963 Protection Door Lock system Child Protection Door Lock Location 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision The Child Protection Door Locks are located inside the rear edge of the door Insert the tip of the ignition key or similar flat bladed object into the lock and rotate approxi mately one quarter turn to the lock or unlock pos
343. s replace if necessary not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN ed 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 128 000 miles 208 000 km L Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the engine air cleaner filter 120 000 miles 195 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Change the automatic transmission fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s M A
344. s authority to operate the device Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially o
345. s deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be adjusted For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Seatback Adjustment 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded When returning the rear seatback to the upright position rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel be sure the seatback is latched 030933273 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Folding Rear Seats Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area the rear seatback can be folded forward Pull on the loops shown in the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 SS necem WARNING The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with The rear cargo area of the vehicle with the rear cupholders seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Then lift the secondary latch located under the front To open the hood two latches must be released edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood 1 Pull the hood
346. s may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 MPEG Sampling Fre Pikade iin Playback of MP3 WMA Files Specification quency kHz p When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded 320 256 224 the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium MPEG 1 Audio BALD 192 160 128 contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more 112 96 80 64 time to start playing the MP3 WMA files a Loading times fo
347. s most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button _ VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between si and d Set the temperature control _ to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to PS turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort WARM WEATHER Press the button to turn recirculate off i If its sunny set the Mode control at or near i and turn the air conditioning on If OP s PTS c im its cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the G button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and J then turn the air 4 Y conditioning
348. same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be app
349. say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MAE e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support re
350. sion for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre i gem es B Rate Gems 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 125 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 256 UNDERSTAN
351. so shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace m
352. spected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the reguirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Ve
353. splay Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MA NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when
354. stances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 system This noise should be considered normal andit checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are does not in any way damage the steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate i
355. straints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child P seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 AM occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your WARNING Continued vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably modified to accommodate a disabled person contact extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or the Customer Center Phone numbers are p
356. t buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system E ls ds meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear Ai window These tether strap anchorages are under a plast
357. t currently broadcast Music Type information YP News News Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following e 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit None 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 16 Digit Character Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode Program Type If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR
358. t switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio freguency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control
359. t use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider d t hields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges EQ C E of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on and open scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equiva
360. t with an improved engine possible coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance Continued intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will re
361. t your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle 350 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Door After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tether Cable i WARNING NOTE If the pes cap is lost DE damaged be sure the amp Never have any smoking materials lit in or near replacement cap is for use with this vehicle the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
362. tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer NN YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building
363. tal load on mended your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Incorrect trailer tongue weight could result in in creased yaw or vehicle instability A negative trailer tongue weight could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle decreasing vehicle stability Negative trailer tongue weight could cause the trailer to squat and potentially become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a runaway trailer condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these e Safety chains must always be used between your guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your ve
364. tery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not In PARK Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Headlights On Key In Ignition Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted Trunk ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled System fault Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operat n Ing Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operating Oil Change Required If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you tum the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the
365. tes cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin e A
366. th little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning er Light in the instrument panel for approxi N mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after ini
367. th adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posi tions section The chart below defines the seating posi tions with an Automatic Locking Re
368. the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to
369. the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of 7 the range marking 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Engine Oil Selection CAUTION For best performance and maximum protection under all Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the pressure and an increase in oil temperature This requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill American Petrol Insti APD Engi il cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil mene SOU a GENE MIE OS Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take yo
370. the engine slightly will help speed up the cooling gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the gASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perfo
371. the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Release the clutch pedal 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 sec onds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis abled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting 308 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equip
372. the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the authorized dealer NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys by performing the following proce dure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN p
373. the proper pressure 338 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN ed The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing L EN N BERGE EEN RERE S HERR a a aa F a a a MM a a a3 H L B L EN L E y H N H EEN EEN i L EEEE E E E E i a a E E L a B E E EEHEHE EIEN EE E EEE N E EIEEE EEE N EEEEIEN LLLI ALLLEELIL L EER EN OBER EEE EEN a E E E NENEEEEEE B B EA N B ER EB TEN ER au a EN N a B B L EES HEN GREER NER HEE BRE E REGER N E E EEHEHE N EN E EEHEHE N EHE FEE NENENEEEE NEE EEN aaa a E NEN N B B Na EN EE EE NEE NEE i a E SERRE EREE E E ENN EA NEE BEHEERDE EE BBE 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommen
374. tial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while h
375. til the light turns off NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 28 High Beam Indicator ED This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro priate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC for further information COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED NOTE e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating elimi nating the need to manually calibrate the compass e f the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler 9 gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The Compass Mini Irip Computer is located in t
376. til you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to
377. tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is i located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 4 Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to approximately 2 0 gal lons 7 6 Liters the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound NOTE This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3 0 gallons of fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light st
378. to each e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire cau e wing on a BE PERD i i Canses wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire AE DEE EE 5 tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte and to maintain the proper pressure nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Monitoring Telltale Light e Receiver Module e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 336 STARTING AND OPE RATING NN Id Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold pla
379. to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required J UMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal
380. tractor ALR or a cinching latch plate gt Driver Center Passenger EN CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock FirstRow N A N A AIR Second Row ALR AIR AR e N A Not wem e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restrai
381. tractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNINCG Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child re
382. trol system ESC has been turned off by the OFF driver 20 Turn Signal Indicators The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 21 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 22 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped 63 This light monitors the ABS This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for ap proximately three seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 should come on If the light does not come o
383. trol the Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of vehicle your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Continued Ads ad Checks You Should Make Outside e Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that Tires have been removed for cleaning Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator peda
384. ts This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 320 STARTING AND OPERATING TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 180 Ibs AER 100 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs Sette aia a AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over i
385. ttings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would e speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking e during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under o e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 8007 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say
386. turer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
387. u are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To
388. ue Weight Trailer Weight 359 die su ad ee ceed IE EV TEXT TeP Yes 354 24 Hour Towing Assistance 112 Disabled V RCE mi He tues ea 68 hae 384 ton d PITE 358 IMs sone ea eds oo oes oot eee eae 365 lu PCM eee ete ce ET 358 lowing ASSINE tanned ES HE EI N dod id 112 DAU PTT mr 296 Tier JOWO oos ses Pee d RAIDER ES EIOS S 354 Cooling System Vis s 4 5 RAS UAE Sep PR 365 ele MASS OE IE OE ER es BOT Minimum Requirements is ozisek Re in 360 Trailer and Tongue Weight 4450946044644 359 Trail r lowing Gude siserisorepesinpiid ai 358 MACE Wole DE sein baptis atipik ene RE 358 Transaxle Automatic SS SS 12 284 287 415 beeld M HEESE IT os 294 EER PP 418 keer ie ASE AR OE DE EER 415 CODIGO oeseri needa geet ows tee eae 287 COUGH AA oo Bb ee ee ee 291 292 Selection of Lubricant 444 2424 ES HER BR RA P 436 dii iis SIG a si Aan a tee ee eG Hi RA UR DE 287 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry oie ste seek pe ge pad 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entity iud sed 3r RI imas 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 164 Transporting Pets N INDEX 479 Tread Wear Indicators 52 482426 pou be ds 328 Inp COMPU 25460 6346 cone DR UR e EE 201 TELS UOMO 42444464 eo eee ee DER 192 Trip Odometer Reset Button 195 Trunk Lid Deck Lid s 2 acea ce bee RE EE 38 Trunk Release Remote Control 38 Trunk Release Emergen
389. ull forward on the bottom of the 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable dan DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907533 of a collision and could result in serious injury or death pe Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE Continued e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Fold Flat Passenger Seatback The recline handle on the front passenger seat also releases the seatback to fold forward WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint i
390. ull outward from as sembly CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb 5 If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 6 Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one quarter turn to secure 7 Replace the round bulb cap from behind the lamp housing and rotate one quarter turn to secure Front Turn Signal 1 Raise and prop open the hood 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp housing 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Fog Lamp NOTE Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is limited We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield 1 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp hous ing 2 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in c
391. ument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to t
392. upant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Airbag e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags may provide e No objects should be placed over or near the enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a airbag on the instrument panel because any such side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a bag is marked with an airbag
393. ur vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap al
394. urn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045607559 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or Mix mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or Mix mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink
395. used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Front Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Center Courtesy Reading Lamp 578 W5W Visor Vanity Lamp s sa ee ue Re bebe nn s A6220 Glove Box Lamp sss ras oot nde Rt drea A6220 Shift Indicator Lamp s sess ssia DEERE NE IKLE14140 Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 579 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Bi Halogen Headlamp ss ei osea n HIR2 Front Turn Signal Lamp 22 00 9604 giana 3157NAK Pront ark Lanp sere et ee ques a ER RE LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Foe Laipe aar aea D H11 Center High Mounted Stop CHMSL Eie uai a eee eee ya ERR A BUR emn qe LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Turn Lamps es ed ies LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Packup Lamp ac koos SE RAD sat oe He MEE 921 teense aM Day sacs wae ow ER HE EP ae ae WOW BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Headlamp front turn signal and front side marker bulb replacement can best be accomplished through the fender wheel opening after splash shield removal N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 Headlamp 1 Raise and prop open the hood Locate the connector behind the headlamp 2 Reach into the engine compartment from the wheel opening grasp the round bulb cap from behind the lamp housing and rotate one quarter turn to remove 3 Reach into the lamp housing and rotate bulb and connector one quarter turn and p
396. utions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 11C41 126 AC Third Edition Printed in U S A
397. ve child Remind all children in the vehicle NOTE that the seat belts are not toys and should not be e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the played with and never leave your child unattended in i the vehicle opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in EES the strap WARNING e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap A Tether Strap Hook B Tether Anchor 1 Cover 3 Attaching Strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped wi
398. ved until you obtain service For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either door will cancel this feature The 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM time for this feature is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in
399. wing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision collision CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes with adequate braking capacity Failure to do this could lead to Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size effort and longer stopping distances stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NN ed Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working properly including hazard flashers Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range third gear for a four speed automatic and the fifth gear for a six speed AutoStick should be selected NOTE Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARL
400. wing beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the vr button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to
401. wing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at anytime the igni tion switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for
402. your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke ll 022310660 Trunk Internal Emergency Release Trunk Internal Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching positions mechanism Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Re

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Amiko Alien 2 - Extreme-SAT    UM10762 User manual for the accurate RTC demo board OM13513  Samsung BD-C8200 Käyttöopas  Frigidaire FPCO06D7MS Product Specifications Sheet  Harbor Freight Tools 10 in. x 18 in. 5 Speed 1/2 HP Benchtop Wood Lathe Product manual  Abocom TC08 User's Manual    USER MANUAL - KVL Comp Kft.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file